MPG Series Compact Cylinder

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG12X25N

  Specifications: MPG12X25N is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 12 mm bore, 25 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 12 12 mm bore X25 25 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end Blank mounting suffix No optional mounting bracket selected Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 17 mm C 21.5 mm CA 8.5 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 2.5 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 25 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Brass 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 12 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 12 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 12 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .3 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Catalog reference weight: 49.7 g. Calculated from the catalog base weight and stroke increment for this bore/configuration; it is a reference, not a measured weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $28.66

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X30S

  Specifications: MPG16X30S is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 30 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and male-threaded rod end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 rod-end joints and sensor mounts (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X30 30 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected Blank rod-end position male-threaded rod end Blank mounting suffix No optional mounting bracket selected Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm E M5 × 0.8 EA 12 mm F 8 mm FA 3 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 30 mm Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-M5X080I Carbon-steel I joint for the male rod F-M5X080Y Carbon-steel Y clevis for the male rod DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Catalog reference weight: 66 g. Calculated from the catalog base weight and stroke increment for this bore/configuration; it is a reference, not a measured weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $37.26

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG10X5S

  Specifications: MPG10X5S is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 10 mm bore, 5 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and male-threaded rod end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 rod-end joints and sensor mounts (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 10 10 mm bore X5 5 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected Blank rod-end position male-threaded rod end Blank mounting suffix No optional mounting bracket selected Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M3 × 0.5 Maximum panel thickness 4 mm Body-thread tightening torque 21 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 0.8 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 44.5 mm AB 20 mm AC 24.5 mm B 15 mm C 19 mm CA 7 mm D 4 mm DA 12 mm E M4 × 0.7 EA 10 mm F 7 mm FA 3 mm G 17 mm GA 4 mm M M12 × 1.0 MA 8 mm P M3 × 0.5 PA 6 mm PB 7 mm R 2.5 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 5 mm Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Brass 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Brass 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG10LB foot bracket for MPG 10 mm bore F-MPG10FA front flange for MPG 10 mm bore F-MPG10FC flat-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-MPG10RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-M4X070I Carbon-steel I joint for the male rod F-M4X070Y Carbon-steel Y clevis for the male rod DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 10 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .2 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, BKC0425-M3 fits each M3 chamber port. Fit PSA4 inline in each separate chamber line, using its flow symbol to restrict cylinder-to-valve exhaust and allow free charging. The M5-threaded PTL reference is not a direct M3 connection. BKC0425-M3: M3×0.5 male; exact 4×2.5 mm tube; locknut typeConnection at each cylinder chamber port PSA4: Two 4 mm OD push-in tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-out control in each chamber line PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve M5 A/B connection; not for the M3 cylinder ports PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads BKC requires exact 4 mm OD/2.5 mm ID tube: insert fully and tighten the locking cap. Match the actual M3 port seal; no supplied gasket or pre-applied sealant is established. Its 0–150°C fitting rating limits this complete branch to 0–70°C at the cylinder’s 0.15–0.7 MPa range. PSA4 takes soft nylon/PU tube; a closed adjustment is not safety isolation. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Catalog reference weight: 29.1 g. Calculated from the catalog base weight and stroke increment for this bore/configuration; it is a reference, not a measured weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $27.84

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG10X30

  Specifications: MPG10X30 is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 10 mm bore, 30 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and male-threaded rod end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 rod-end joints and sensor mounts (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 10 10 mm bore X30 30 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position Blank rod-end position male-threaded rod end Blank mounting suffix No optional mounting bracket selected Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M3 × 0.5 Maximum panel thickness 4 mm Body-thread tightening torque 21 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 0.8 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 39.5 mm AB 20 mm AC 19.5 mm B 15 mm C 19 mm CA 7 mm D 4 mm DA 12 mm E M4 × 0.7 EA 10 mm F 7 mm FA 3 mm G 17 mm GA 4 mm M M12 × 1.0 MA 8 mm P M3 × 0.5 PA 6 mm PB 7 mm R 2.5 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 30 mm Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Brass 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG10LB foot bracket for MPG 10 mm bore F-MPG10FA front flange for MPG 10 mm bore F-MPG10FC flat-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-MPG10RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-M4X070I Carbon-steel I joint for the male rod F-M4X070Y Carbon-steel Y clevis for the male rod Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 10 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .2 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, BKC0425-M3 fits each M3 chamber port. Fit PSA4 inline in each separate chamber line, using its flow symbol to restrict cylinder-to-valve exhaust and allow free charging. The M5-threaded PTL reference is not a direct M3 connection. BKC0425-M3: M3×0.5 male; exact 4×2.5 mm tube; locknut typeConnection at each cylinder chamber port PSA4: Two 4 mm OD push-in tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-out control in each chamber line PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve M5 A/B connection; not for the M3 cylinder ports PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads BKC requires exact 4 mm OD/2.5 mm ID tube: insert fully and tighten the locking cap. Match the actual M3 port seal; no supplied gasket or pre-applied sealant is established. Its 0–150°C fitting rating limits this complete branch to 0–70°C at the cylinder’s 0.15–0.7 MPa range. PSA4 takes soft nylon/PU tube; a closed adjustment is not safety isolation. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Catalog reference weight: 36.8 g. Calculated from the catalog base weight and stroke increment for this bore/configuration; it is a reference, not a measured weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $26.93

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG6X5S

  Specifications: MPG6X5S is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 6 mm bore, 5 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and male-threaded rod end. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 rod-end joints and sensor mounts (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 6 6 mm bore X5 5 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected Blank rod-end position male-threaded rod end Blank mounting suffix No optional mounting bracket selected Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M3 × 0.5 Maximum panel thickness 4 mm Body-thread tightening torque 12.5 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 0.3 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 38 mm AB 17 mm AC 21 mm B 14 mm C 16.5 mm CA 6 mm D 3 mm DA 9 mm E M3 × 0.5 EA 7 mm F 5.5 mm FA 2.4 mm G 13 mm GA 4 mm M M10 × 1.0 MA 8 mm P M3 × 0.5 PA 5.5 mm PB 6.5 mm R 2 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 5 mm Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Brass 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Stainless steel 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG6LB foot bracket for MPG 6 mm bore F-MPG6FA front flange for MPG 6 mm bore F-MPG6FC flat-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-MPG6RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-M3X050I Carbon-steel I joint for the male rod F-M3X050Y Carbon-steel Y clevis for the male rod DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 6 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .1 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, BKC0425-M3 fits each M3 chamber port. Fit PSA4 inline in each separate chamber line, using its flow symbol to restrict cylinder-to-valve exhaust and allow free charging. The M5-threaded PTL reference is not a direct M3 connection. BKC0425-M3: M3×0.5 male; exact 4×2.5 mm tube; locknut typeConnection at each cylinder chamber port PSA4: Two 4 mm OD push-in tube ends; no pipe threadInline meter-out control in each chamber line PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve M5 A/B connection; not for the M3 cylinder ports PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads BKC requires exact 4 mm OD/2.5 mm ID tube: insert fully and tighten the locking cap. Match the actual M3 port seal; no supplied gasket or pre-applied sealant is established. Its 0–150°C fitting rating limits this complete branch to 0–70°C at the cylinder’s 0.15–0.7 MPa range. PSA4 takes soft nylon/PU tube; a closed adjustment is not safety isolation. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Catalog reference weight: 18.25 g. Calculated from the catalog base weight and stroke increment for this bore/configuration; it is a reference, not a measured weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $24.33

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X10SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X10SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 10 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X10 10 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 10 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 48.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $37.78

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X40SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X40SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 40 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X40 40 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 40 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 72.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $42.20

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X30SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X30SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 30 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X30 30 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 30 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 64.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $40.77

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X15SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X15SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 15 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X15 15 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 15 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 52.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $38.50

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X20SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X20SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 20 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X20 20 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 20 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 56.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $39.21

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X35SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X35SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 35 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X35 35 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 35 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 68.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $41.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X25SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X25SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 25 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X25 25 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 25 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 60.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $40.06

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X40NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X40NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 40 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X40 40 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 40 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 66.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $37.02

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X15NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X15NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 15 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X15 15 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 15 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 46.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $33.32

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X5NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X5NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 5 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X5 5 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 5 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 38.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $31.76

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X35NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X35NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 35 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X35 35 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 35 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 62.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $36.31

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X10NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X10NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 10 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X10 10 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 10 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 42.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $32.47

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X5SNFA

  Specifications: MPG16X5SNFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 5 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X5 5 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 5 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 44.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $36.94

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X30NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X30NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 30 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X30 30 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 30 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 58.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $35.46

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X10SFA

  Specifications: MPG16X10SFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 10 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and male-threaded rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 rod-end joints and sensor mounts (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X10 10 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected Blank rod-end position male-threaded rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm E M5 × 0.8 EA 12 mm F 8 mm FA 3 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 10 mm Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-M5X080I Carbon-steel I joint for the male rod F-M5X080Y Carbon-steel Y clevis for the male rod DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 50 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $37.84

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X20NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X20NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 20 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X20 20 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 20 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 50.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $34.03

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X40SFA

  Specifications: MPG16X40SFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 40 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and male-threaded rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 rod-end joints and sensor mounts (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X40 40 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected Blank rod-end position male-threaded rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm E M5 × 0.8 EA 12 mm F 8 mm FA 3 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 40 mm Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-M5X080I Carbon-steel I joint for the male rod F-M5X080Y Carbon-steel Y clevis for the male rod DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 74 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $42.25

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X25NFA

  Specifications: MPG16X25NFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 25 mm stroke, no magnetic option in the standard suffix position, and smooth rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X25 25 mm nominal stroke Blank magnetic position No magnetic piston selected by the standard order-code position N smooth rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 43.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 19.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Rod end E Smooth; no e × ternal thread Reference male-rod EA 12 mm Reference male-rod F 8 mm Reference male-rod FA 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 25 mm N selects an unthreaded rod. EA, F and FA retained from the male-rod reference view describe the thread/nut callouts, not a supplied external thread or rod nut on the N variant. Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 12 Magnet washer Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration 13 Magnet Magnetic-option component; not fitted in a non-magnetic configuration Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM; catalog option for male-threaded rod versions only, not for this smooth-rod N model Magnetic switch condition This code does not select a magnetic piston. A magnetic switch cannot provide piston-position sensing on a non-magnetic cylinder. Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 54.6 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $34.74

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac MPG series: double-acting compact cylinder - MPG16X30SFA

  Specifications: MPG16X30SFA is an AirTAC double-acting cylinder with a 16 mm bore, 30 mm stroke, a magnetic piston, and male-threaded rod end. The FA suffix selects front flange. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download AirTAC 2022 Sensor and Mounting Compatibility Guide (PDF) Download 2022 mounting brackets (PDF) Download 2022 rod-end joints and sensor mounts (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning for This Model MPG double-acting cylinder 16 16 mm bore X30 30 mm nominal stroke S after stroke Magnetic piston selected Blank rod-end position male-threaded rod end FA front flange Technical Specifications Parameter Details Action double-acting cylinder Working medium Air filtered through a 40 μm filter or finer Operating pressure 0.15–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa; a proof-test rating, not the continuous operating limit Ambient and fluid temperature −20 to 70 °C Piston speed 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance +1.0 / 0 mm Cushioning Bumper Air connection M5 × 0.8 Maximum panel thickness 5 mm Body-thread tightening torque 34 N·m Rod-end tightening torque 1.6 N·m Product Features The compact, low-mass cylinder is designed for convenient installation and removal. Accurate rod guidance and a rubber-coated rear cover support compact operation without an additional lubricator. The magnetic version provides position sensing through the body switch groove. Dimensions for This Bore and Configuration Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread, angle or tolerance is stated. Letter labels follow the 164–167 printed-page drawings in the 2022 Chinese catalog. A base letter value is not automatically an overall length; use its stated stroke relationship. Parameter Details A 48.5 mm AB 24 mm AC 24.5 mm B 20 mm C 24.5 mm CA 10 mm D 6 mm DA 14 mm E M5 × 0.8 EA 12 mm F 8 mm FA 3 mm G 19 mm GA 4 mm M M14 × 1.0 MA 10 mm P M5 × 0.8 PA 6.5 mm PB 7.5 mm R 3 mm Stroke-dependent Drawing Relationships Parameter Details A outline A + stroke AC outline AC + stroke Stroke used in the order code 30 mm Construction and Materials Parameter Details 1 Hex nut Stainless steel 2 Piston rod Stainless steel 3 Rod seal NBR 4 Body nut Carbon steel 5 Body Aluminum alloy 6 Bumper TPU 7 Piston seal NBR 8 Piston Aluminum alloy 9 Retaining ring Spring steel 10 Rear cover Rubber-coated aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 12 Magnet washer NBR 13 Magnet Rare-earth material Item numbers identify the catalog sectional drawing. They are component references, not spare-part order codes or package quantities. Matching Accessories and Mounting Parameter Details F-MPG16LB foot bracket for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FA front flange for MPG 16 mm bore F-MPG16FC flat-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-MPG16RC spherical-face bumper cap in POM, for the matching male-threaded piston rod F-M5X080I Carbon-steel I joint for the male rod F-M5X080Y Carbon-steel Y clevis for the male rod DMSH / CMSH / EMSH H-profile magnetic switches for this magnetic MPG-family bore; order separately Accessory codes are listed for selection. Optional brackets, rod joints and switches are separate items unless the selected code or the stated pin note expressly identifies them. Component item numbers do not specify purchase quantities. Selected FA Mounting Dimensions Parameter Details A 36 mm B 49 mm C 22 mm D 5.5 mm E 2.5 mm F 25.5 mm Letters in this table belong to the FA accessory drawing. Stroke-dependent C, D, E, N or A dimensions must be read with the added-stroke callouts and the selected cylinder action; they are not all fixed overall lengths. Stroke and Option Selection Parameter Details Standard strokes for this bore/action 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm Intermediate strokes Use the listed standard strokes and the dimensions for the selected stroke. Magnetic selection Select the magnetic option before ordering a position switch; electrical type, cable and connector are selected separately. Selection, Installation and Operation Select bore from the required thrust and available pressure; then check stroke, load direction, mounting, cushioning and sensing. The general catalog load-factor references are at most 0.7 for static/slow work and at most 0.5 for 50–500 mm/s motion. They do not replace the load and guide checks for this cylinder. Keep the piston rod and load aligned. Support lateral or eccentric loads with an appropriate guide; avoid applying bending force or tightening torque through the rod or guide. Use clean filtered air. Prevent freezing, water, dust and corrosive substances from entering the cylinder. The cylinder is prelubricated; if lubrication is introduced, use additive-free ISO VG32 oil and continue that lubrication. Start with the speed controller restricted, then open it gradually. Choose the circuit and flow-control direction for the action and load; a double-acting meter-out circuit is a general reference, not a guarantee of equal speed or precise stopping. Isolate the air and electrical supplies and release trapped pressure before maintenance. Check the mounting and retained parts before repressurizing. A C-ring must be fully seated before operation. Circuit Selection Reference at 500 mm/s Parameter Details Reference bore 16 mm Effective flow area at the reference speed .5 mm² Tube outside / inside diameter 4 / 2.5 mm Example speed controller PTLM5 Example silencer BSLM5 Example solenoid valves 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Example air-piloted valves 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 The general 2022 selection table gives these circuit examples for this bore at a theoretical 500 mm/s reference speed. They are not included accessories, a guaranteed achieved speed, or a statement that every example screws directly into this cylinder. Match the actual port thread, action, tubing, valve capacity and operating conditions. Side-load Curve The MPG graph plots allowable side force against stroke: the horizontal axis spans 0–45 mm and the vertical axis 0–1 N. Use the curve for the selected bore. A scale endpoint is not an allowable load for every stroke; the rod must not be used as a general-purpose lateral guide. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables H-profile: CMSH — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020, CMSH-030, CMSH-050, CMSH-100, CMSH-M08, CMSH-M08010, CMSH-M08020, CMSH-M08030, CMSH-M12, CMSH-M12010, CMSH-M12020, CMSH-M12030, A05-CMSH-020, A05-CMSH-030, A05-CMSH-050, A05-CMSH-100 H-profile: CMSH — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSH-020-H, CMSH-030-H, CMSH-050-H, CMSH-100-H, CMSH-M08-H, CMSH-M08010-H, CMSH-M08020-H, CMSH-M08030-H, CMSH-M12-H, CMSH-M12010-H, CMSH-M12020-H, CMSH-M12030-H H-profile: DMSH — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSH-020, DMSH-030, DMSH-050, DMSH-100, DMSH-M08, DMSH-M08010, DMSH-M08020, DMSH-M08030, DMSH-M12, DMSH-M12010, DMSH-M12020, DMSH-M12030, DMSH-020-W, DMSH-030-W, DMSH-050-W, DMSH-100-W, A05-DMSH-020, A05-DMSH-030, A05-DMSH-050, A05-DMSH-100, A06-DMSH-020, A06-DMSH-030, A06-DMSH-050, A06-DMSH-100 H-profile: DMSH — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-N020, DMSH-N030, DMSH-N050, DMSH-N100, DMSH-NM08, DMSH-NM08010, DMSH-NM08020, DMSH-NM08030, DMSH-NM12, DMSH-NM12010, DMSH-NM12020, DMSH-NM12030, DMSH-N020-W, DMSH-N030-W, DMSH-N050-W, DMSH-N100-W H-profile: DMSH — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSH-P020, DMSH-P030, DMSH-P050, DMSH-P100, DMSH-PM08, DMSH-PM08010, DMSH-PM08020, DMSH-PM08030, DMSH-PM12, DMSH-PM12010, DMSH-PM12020, DMSH-PM12030, DMSH-P020-W, DMSH-P030-W, DMSH-P050-W, DMSH-P100-W H-profile: EMSH — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSH-020, EMSH-030, EMSH-050, EMSH-100, EMSH-M08, EMSH-M08010, EMSH-M08020, EMSH-M08030, EMSH-M12, EMSH-M12010, EMSH-M12020, EMSH-M12030, EMSH-020-W, EMSH-030-W, EMSH-050-W, EMSH-100-W, EMSH-M08-W, EMSH-M08010-W, EMSH-M08020-W, EMSH-M08030-W, EMSH-M12-W, EMSH-M12010-W, EMSH-M12020-W, EMSH-M12030-W, A05-EMSH-020, A05-EMSH-030, A05-EMSH-050, A05-EMSH-100, A06-EMSH-020, A06-EMSH-030, A06-EMSH-050, A06-EMSH-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 Choose an H-profile sensor for the magnetic MPG cylinder, then match its electrical circuit and cable. These separately ordered options are alternatives, not a required set. The H in CMSH/DMSH/EMSH identifies the sensor profile; a final -H on a CMS order code instead selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSH reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSH and EMSH require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSH outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSH also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSH-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSH-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSH versions with the final -H suffix. The standard MPG cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected H-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional circuit connections and complete valve codes For the existing 4×2.5 mm reference, choose PC4M5 or PTL4M5A-M at each M5 cylinder port; keep the two chamber lines separate. The A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and allows free charging. Use PC4M5 at the valve A/B ports. Seat the M5 gaskets correctly; 0.05 N·m is the PTL cap-rotation recommendation, not fitting-tightening torque. PC4M5: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube ODSelected valve A/B connection; also M5 cylinder ports if a straight connection is chosen PTL4M5A-M: M5×0.8 male; 4 mm tube OD; mini A-typeMeter-out controller at each M5 cylinder port, instead of a straight fitting PC401: PT1/8 male; 4 mm tube ODOnly the separate 4A pilot connection if that pilot tube is 4 mm OD US98A040025100MBU: Polyester PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollOptional tube packaging example, cut to installed length UE95A040025100MBU: Polyether PU; 4×2.5 mm; blue 100 m rollAlternative tube packaging example, cut to installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable220 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable110 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable24 V AC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: 5/2 valve; M5×0.8 main/exhaust ports; terminal cable12 V DC direction control; 050/200 = 0.5/2 m leads 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. The final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Use the selected electrical or pneumatic control scheme, not both. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 alternatives need one/two external signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. PC401 is conditional on 4 mm pilot tubing; seal its tapered thread appropriately. Existing BSLM5 belongs at the M5 valve exhaust ports R/S, not at cylinder working ports. These gray PC/PTL options take soft nylon/PU tube. Use this branch within 0.15–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to any lower component limit. The two tube codes are alternative 100 m rolls, not required installed lengths. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; derate for temperature and the lowest component limit. Minimum bend radii are 10 mm for US98A and 8 mm for UE95A.Weight Reference Estimated reference weight: 66 g. Based on the same family/bore catalog mass data and the stated configuration; it is not an AirTAC published weight for this exact variant or a measured weight. The selected mounting bracket mass is not separately listed in the cylinder weight table; this reference does not certify a packed assembly weight. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog.

  Read more less

  $40.83

  View options

Show more products